Professional Documents
Culture Documents
VESSEL
MANUAL
Training Course for
PVELITE Software (Based on ASME SEC.VIII, DIV.I)
By: M.ASGARZADEGAN
Rev.0: JUNE. 2009
Page 1 of 79
ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﭘﺮﻭﺭﺩﮔﺎﺭ
ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻴﻦ ﻋﺰﻳﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﺪ
ASME Sec.VIII, Div.Iﺑﻬﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ PVEliteﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺿﻤﻦ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻗﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﻬـﺮﺩﺍﺩ ﻃـﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﭘـﻮﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻬﻨـﺪﺱ ﻣﺮﺗـﻀﻲ ﺷـﻔﻴﻌﻲ ،ﻣـﺪﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺘـﺮﻡ ﺷـﺮﻛﺖ
ﻳﻮﺭﻭﺍﺳﻼﺕ ﭘﺎﺭﺱ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻫﻨﻤﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﺭﺯﻧﺪﻩ ﺧـﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴـﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎﻧـﺐ ﻗـﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻧـﺪ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨـﻴﻦ ﺗﻤـﺎﻣﻲ
ﺩﻭﺳﺘﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻧﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﺍﻣﻲ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔـﺮﺩﺩ ﻛـﻪ
ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻳﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ.
Page 2 of 79
ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ
ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ -1
Page 3 of 79
ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ – ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ
1. ASME Sec.VIII, Div.I, Ed.2007
2. ASME Sec.II
3. Pressure Vessel Design Manual
By : R.Moss
4. Pressure Vessel Design Handbook
By : H.Bednar
5. Pressure Vessel Design Concepts & Principles
By : J.Spence
6. Pressure Vessel Handbook
By : F.Megyesy
7. IPS
8. NIOEC
9. NPCS
10. ASTM
11. ARTICLES
Page 4 of 79
ASME SEC.VIII, DIV.I ﻓﺼﻞ ﺩﻭﻡ – ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ
Page 5 of 79
: ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖASME Sec. VIII, Div.I ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﺪ
By Welding UW
Subsection B: Fabrication
By Forging UF
By Brazing UB
َ
Carbon & Low Alloy Steel UCS
Nonferrous Materials UNF
High Alloy Steel UHA
Cast Iron UCI
ASME Sec.
VIII, Div.I Subsection C: Material Cladding UCL
Cast Ductile Iron UCD
Layered construction ULW
Rules for S&T Heat Exch. UHX
Mandatory App.: 1, 2,…,9 (Jacketed Vessels),…,26 (Expansion Joints),…
NonMandatory App. (Good Practice): A, C,…, F (Linings),…, EE (Half
Pipe Jackets),…
ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ. ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ، ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩUG * ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ
.ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ
ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩASME ( ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪPressure Parts) * ﺟﻬﺖ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ..... ﻭAISC ﻭAISI ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ، (NonPressure Parts) ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ
ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲPass Partition ( ﻭTowers) ( ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺟﻬﺎTray) ( ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻴﻨﻲInternals) ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ.ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ
. ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪNonPressure Parts " ( ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎS&T Heat Exchangers)
Page 6 of 79
* ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ ASME Sec.VIII Div.Iﺟﻬﺖ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ Max. Stress Theoryﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺩﺭ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺕﺋﻭﺭﻱ ،ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺕﺋﻭﺭﻱ ،ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ Brittleﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺑﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ Ductileﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﺪﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ
ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ" ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ :
ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎ ،ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ 2ﺗﺎ 5ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎ ،ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ
ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﻳﻢ :
ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ) (1ﻭ ) (2ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﭘﻴﺶ
ﺑﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ.
Page 7 of 79
ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ :
Yield Stress / Tensile Stress
Allowable Stress = ( )
Safety Factor
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ S.F.ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ :
ASME Sec.VIII Div.I:
Sall = Min (2/3 Sy, 2/7ST)
API 650:
)Sall = Min (2/3 Sy, 2/5ST
ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ ،ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻠﺰ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻗﻮﻳﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ
ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ،ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ “ ”Joint Efficiencyﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
PD PR m
t = =
2 S S
P ( R i + 0. 5 t ) PR i
t = = t Þ t = f ( P , R , S , E )
S SE - 0 . 6 P
ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ E ،ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ) (Longitudinal J.E.ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ 0.6ﻃﺒﻖ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﺎ" ﺑﺎﻳﺪ 0.5ﺑﺎﺷﺪ
ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ" ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ 0.6ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺿﻤﻨﺎ" ﺩﻣﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ Sall
ﺑﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺛﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ،ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻭ
....ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺮﻡ C.A.ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ:
PR i
t = + C . A .
SE - 0 . 6 P
)P, S (psi) , t, C.A., Ri (in.
* ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ
ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ:
* ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﺶ ) (Erosionﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ C.A.ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ASMEﺗﺮﻡ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Page 8 of 79
CATEGORY : UW3
Category A:
Longitudinal and spiral welded joints within the main shell, communicating chambers, Transitions in
diameter, or nozzles; any welded joint within a sphere, within a formed or flat head, or within the side
plates of a flatsided vessel; circumferential welded joints connecting hemispherical heads to main
shells, to transition in diameters, to nozzles, or communicating chambers.
Category B:
Circumferential welded joints within the main shell, communicating chambers, nozzles, or transitions
in diameter including joints between the transition and a cylinder at either the large or small end;
circumferential welded joints connecting formed heads other than hemispherical to main shells, to
transitions in diameter, to nozzles, or to communicating chambers.
Category C:
Welded joints connecting flanges, van stone laps, tubesheets, or flat heads to main shell, to formed
heads, to transitions in diameter, to nozzles, or to communicating chambers any welded joint
connecting one side plate to another side plate of a flatsided vessel.
Category D:
Welded joints connecting communicating chambers, or nozzles to main shells, to spheres, to transition
in diameter, to heads, or to flatsided vessels, and those joints connecting nozzles to communicating
chambers (for nozzles at the small end of a transition in diameter see Category B).
Page 9 of 79
RT & UT : UW11
Joint Efficiency : UW12
ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺨﺮﺏ ) (NDTﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ J.E.ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ RTﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮ ) (Butt weldﻧﻮﻉ 1ﺍﮔﺮ
RTﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ E=1ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ
Seamlessﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ RTﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ Spotﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ) ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ TJointﻫﺎ
ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺯ ﺟﻮﺵ ،ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﺱ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ E=0.85ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ
ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻼ RT " ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ E=0.7 ،ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Page 10 of 79
ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩRT ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ
ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﻛﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻲ، ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ. ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ
، ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩRT ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﺿﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ. ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩE=0.7 ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭRT
ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﻲFull RT ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ
. ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﺪSpot RT ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ
Table UW12
1, 5
MAX. ALLOW. JOINT EFF. FOR ARC & GAS WELDED JOINTS
Degree of Radiographic Examination
2 3
Type No. Joint Description Limitations Category Full Spot None
(1) Butt joints as attained by None A, B, C, D 1.00 0.85 0.70
double welding or by
other means which will
obtain the same quality of
deposited weld metal on
the inside & outside weld
surfaces to agree with
the requirements of UW
35. Welds using metal
backing strips which
remain in place are
excluded.
(2) Single welded butt joint (a) None except in (b) below A, B, C & D 0.90 0.80 0.65
with backing strip other 0.80 0.65
than those included (b) Circumferential butt joints A, B, & C 0.90
under (1) with one plate offset; see UW
13(b)(4) and Fig. UW13.1,
sketch (k)
(3) Single welded butt joint Circumferential butt joints A, B, & C NA NA 0.60
without use of backing only, not over 5/16" in. (16
strip. mm) thick and not over 24 in.
(610 mm) outside diameter
(4) Double full fillet lap joint (a) Longitudinal joints not over A NA NA 0.55
3/8 in. (10 mm) thick
(b) Circumferential joints not
over 5/8 in. (16 mm) thick 6
B & C
(5) Single full fillet lap joints 4 B NA NA 0.50
(a) Circumferential joints for
with plug welds attachment of heads not over
conforming to UW17 24 in. (610 mm) outside
diameter to shells not over 1.2
in. (13 mm) thick
(b) Circumferential joints for
the attachment to shells of
jackets not over 5/8 in. (16
mm) in nominal thickness
where the distance from the
center of the plug weld to the
edge of the plate is not less
than 1 1/2 times the diameter
of the hole for the plug
(6) Single full fillet lap joints (a) For the attachment of A & B NA NA 0.45
without plug welds heads convex to pressure to
shells not over 5/8 in.
(16mm) required thickness,
only with use of fillet weld in
Page 11 of 79
inside of the shell; or
(b) for attachment of heads
having pressure on either
side, to shells not over 24 in.
(610 mm) inside diameter and
not over 1/4 in. (6 mm)
required thickness with fillet A & B
weld on outside of head
flange only
(7) Corner joints, full As limited by Fig. UW13.2 7 NA NA NA
C & D
penetration, partial and Fig UW16.1
penetration, and/of fillet
welded
(8) Angle joints Design per U2(g) for B, C, & D NA NA NA
Category B and C joints
Notes:
(1) The single factor shown for each combination of joint category and degree of radiographic examination
replaces both the stress reduction factor and the J.E. factor considerations previously used in this Division.
(2) See UW12(a) and UW51
(3) See UW12(b) and UW52
(4) Joints attaching hemispherical heads to shells are excluded
(5) E = 1.0 for butt joints in compression
(6) For Type No. 4 Category C joint, limitations not applicable for bolted flange connections.
(7) There is no joint efficiency E in the design formulas of this Division for Category C and D joints. When needed,
a value of E not greater than 1.00 may be used.
Impact Test (UG84)
( ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﺖCrack ) ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺎﻋﻪ ﺗﺮﻙ، Toughness
ﻭ10mm x 10mm ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ3) ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﻣﻪ.ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﭼﻘﺮﻣﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ
. ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩUG84 ﻭISO 148 ﻭ ﻳﺎSA370 ( ﻭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ50mm ﻃﻮﻝ
ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ. ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻨﺪMDMT ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱV ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺷﻜﺎﻑ
. ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩUG84.1 ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ،ﺍﺛﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﭼﻜﺶ
Page 12 of 79
(2ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺣﺮﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺪ ،ﺗﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖUG20(f) :
(3ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ) ، UCS66(b)(3ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺗﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ):ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ (UCS66.1
(4ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ) UCS68(cﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ، P.No.1ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﺪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ PWHTﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﻛﺎﻫﺸﻲ ﺑﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ 17˚Cﺩﺭ MDMTﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺳﺖ.
(5ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ UCS66ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ ،ﺗﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.
Page 13 of 79
* ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ،ﺑﻪ Table UCS66ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ.
* ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ) (Governing Thk.ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ) UCS66(aﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ
ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
(6ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ Normalizeﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ MDMTﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ
ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ Curveﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱ Impact Testﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ.
ﻧﻜﺎﺕ:
* ﺗﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ:
1 Base Plate
2 HAZ (Heat Affected Zone)
3 Weld Metal
4 WPS, PQR
* ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ Impact Testﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ ،ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ MDMTﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ،ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ،ﻟﻮﻟﻪ،
ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻭ .....ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ.
* ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ 46 ºCﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ C.S.ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ S.S.ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ .ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ Impact Testﺑﺮﺍﻱ S.S.ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Page 14 of 79
* ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ Impact Testﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ Supplementary Essentialﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ Gr. No.
ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻱ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ PQRﻣﻮﺍﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ P. No.ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ Gr. No.ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ.
S < Sall
ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ،ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻲ
ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ،ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ MAWPﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ treqﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ tselectedﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺗﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ MAP New & Cold ،ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ:
P (R i + C . A . )
= t
sel.
+ C . A .
SE - 0 . 6 P
*ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ "Operating Liquid" ﺩﺭ MAWPﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ MAPncﺑﻲ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
* MAWPﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻚ ﺗﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺳﭙﺲ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ
MAWPﻛﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻼﻙ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪ .ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ
ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ،ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ
ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ Pﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ Sallﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺗﺴﺖ ،ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ
ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ
ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺷﻮﺩ:
= t req
(
P R +C . A
i
) .
+ C . A .
SE . - 0 . 6 P
Page 15 of 79
General : UG16
: UG16(b) ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺷﻞ ﻭ ﻫﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺪﻫﻲ )ﺑﺠﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﺍﺕ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ( ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ 1.5 mm + C.A.
ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎﺋﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ:
: UG16(d) ﺍﮔﺮ Pipeﻭ ﻳﺎ Tubeﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺲ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ
ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ..
tnominal x 0.875 = tminimum
: UG16(e) ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ ﻛﺪ ،ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ.
ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ :
1) Hemispherical
2) Ellipsoidal
3) Torispherical (Dished & Flanged)
4) Conical
5) Toriconical
6) Flat
7) Body Flange
Page 16 of 79
ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ 1 Different Shape (Diameter)
Discontinuity Stress 2 Different Material
3 Different Thickness
4 Different Temp.
5 Change in Direction
ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ Discontinuity Stress ،ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ .ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ
ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ) rﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ( ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ Hemisphericalﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ .ﺑﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ
ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ Blindﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻛﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮﺵ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ
ﺟﻮﺵ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ Category Aﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
.
: UG 27 ﻋﺪﺳﻲ Hemispherical
ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﺶ Discontinuityﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ
ﺁﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
PR
t req . Hemispheri cal =
2 SE - 0 . 2 P
PR
t req .shell = tr ≈ ½ tr
SE - 0 . 6 P
Hemis. Cylinder
: UG 32 ﻋﺪﺳﻲEllipsoidal
PDK
Div.I, Appendix 1 = t
2 SE - 0 . 2 P
2
æ D ö æ æ D ö ö
÷ ÷ k = f ç ÷ ® k = 1 / 6 ç 2 + ç
è 2 h ø ç è 2 h ø ÷ø
è
D PD
Ellip .2 : 1 Þ = = 2 ® t
2 h 2 SE - 0 . 2 P
Page 17 of 79
Torispherical ﻋﺪﺳﻲ: UG 32
:ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ
PLM
Div .1 , Appendix ( 1 - 4 ) Þ t =
2 SE - 0 . 2 P
æ L ö 1 æ L ö
M = f ç ÷ M = çç 3 + ÷
è r ø 4 è r ÷ø
· Klopper Head
L = O.D. of Shell
r = 0.1 O.D. of Shell
· Korbbogen Head
L = 0.8 O.D. of Shell
r = 0.154 O.D. of Shell
tr ≥ tr :ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ
Tori. Cyl.
Page 18 of 79
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ Toris.ﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ Ellip.ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ،K > 1ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ 70 ksiﺑﺎﺷﺪ:
Min. (2/7 Sut , 2/3 Sy)
Sall =Min.
20 ksi
:Straight Flange
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ،ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺑﻨﺎﻡ S.F.ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ UW13.1ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ:
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ) S.F.ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ (Skirtﺩﺭ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺁﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩ:
* ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺿﺨﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ Tapered
Transitionﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ:
t1t2 > Min. (thickness of thinner part , 1/8" (3.2mm))
4
Tapered Transition is required
ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ Tapered Transitionﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻬﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺿﺨﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭘﺦ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ .ﺩﺭ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺦ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ
E=1ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺦ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﻢ .ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ Tapered Trans.
ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ﻃﺒﻖ .(UW42ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺴﺎﺋ ﻟﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ،ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ
ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ، UW13ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺿﺨﻴﻤﺘﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ) (T.L.ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺦ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ 1:3ﺩﺭ
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ) .ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(
Page 19 of 79
: UG 32 ﻋﺪﺳﻲ Conical
ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺭﺍﺱ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺳﺖ.
UG32: α ≤ 30º
Page 20 of 79
ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ
PR PR
s c = sc =
tCos µ shell
t
ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺿﺮﺏ S.E.ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ δﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ Ri+tﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ Rﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺎﻻ:
PR PR
t Cone = , = t shell
Cos µ (S .E - 0 . 6 p ) S .E - 0 . 6 P
* ﺍﮔﺮ ، α > 30º ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ) Appendix 1.5(gﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻲ Timoshenkoﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
ﺣﺴﺎﺳﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪ σL Sinαﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺩﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺭﺍ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺧﻢ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ
ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ .ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ 0. 25 R s t s ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ،
Rsﻭ tsﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ) (at large endﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺴﻲ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ Areq.ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ
ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺿﺮﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
D i
L i =
2Cos µ
1 æ L ö PLM
M = çç 3 + ÷ = t
4 è r ÷ø 2 SE - 0 . 2 P
Page 21 of 79
: UG 34 ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺨﺖ(Welded Flat Heads )
ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ،ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﭼﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ Flat Headﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ .ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ UG34ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
CP
t = d ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺗﺨﺖ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻭﻱ:
SE
ZCP d
t = d Z = 3. 4 - 2 . 4 ; £ 2 . 5 ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺗﺨﺖ ﻏﻴﺮﺩﺍﻳﺮﻭﻱ:
SE D
Cﺿﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Headﺑﻪ Shellﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ Shellﺍﺳﺖ .ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ
ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ .ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ Sketch e & fﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ:
m=tr/ts
ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ
ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ Deflectionﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻫﺪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
t
Deflection < h
2
Page 22 of 79
:Extreme Fiber Elongation
ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ E.F.E ،ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻃﺒﻖ ) UCS79(dﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ
ﺷﻞ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ Cold Formingﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ،E.F.E > 5%.ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻡ ﺩﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ
) (UCS56: Requirements for PWHTﺷﻮﺩ.
* ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ، P.No.1, G.No.1 & 2ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﻴﭽﻴﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺗﺎ
E.F.E. = 40%ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ:
1 Plate thick. > 16mm
2 Reduction from the AsRolled Thickness >10%
3 Impact test required
4 Lethal service
5 120ºC < TForming < 480ºC
Ro = Original C.L. Radius
t = Plate Thickness
ﺩﺭﺍﺛﺮ ﻓﺮﻡ ﺩﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻫﺮﭼﻪ
ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ E.F.E. ،ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ.
ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء 150 mmﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ
Knuckleﺣﺘﻤﺎ" ﺍﺯ E.F.E. = 5%ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ .ﭘﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ
ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ(Ro = ∞) .
Page 23 of 79
: UG28 & UG33ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ
ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ
ﻧﻘﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ Ventingﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ .ﺣﺘﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ﻫﺎ ،ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ )ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ
ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ( ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﺎﭘﻴﺶ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ
ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺧﻼء ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ،ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﻚ ﺟﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ 1 bargﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ Jacketﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ) Bucklingﻛﻤﺎﻧﺶ(
ﻭ ) Wrinklingﺍﻋﻮﺟﺎﺝ( ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ
ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Do/t
tSelected for int. pres. : ASME, Sec II, Part D, Subpart 3, Fig.G Factor A
L/Do
Pa = Maximum Allowable External Working Pressure (psi)
Do = Outside shell diameter (in.)
)t = Min. required thk. (in.
Page 24 of 79
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ : 1ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ tﻭ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ Lﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ) Stiff. Ringﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ (Doﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ
L D
ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ Factor Bﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ Paﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ. oﻭ
D o t
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ : 2ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ Butt weldﺍﺯ Fillet weldﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ
Pﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ 2Pﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ(UG28(g)) .
Page 25 of 79
Stiffening Ring: UG29
ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ،ﻗﻄﺮ ،ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻋﻮﺽ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ) (Leﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ
ﺩﻫﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ Pa < PExt.ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ.
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ Stiffening Ringﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ Pa=Pmax.ext.working pres.ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ
ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻃﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ Unstiffenedﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ
ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ، Unstiffenedﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻳﻨﮕﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻳﻨﮕﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ
ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ،ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﺪ.
æ 2 A ö
I s = çç D 0 L s ( t + s ) A ÷÷ / 14
è L s ø
I s = required moment of inertia of stiffener (in 4 )
Do = outside diameter of cylinder (in.)
t = Thk. of cylinder, head or conical section (in.)
A = “Factor A” from ASME Sec.II, Part D, Subpart 3
As = cross sectional area of stiffener (in 2 )
)Ls = length between stiffeners (in.
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ:
2
Ix + Ix + Ar > Is
Shell Profile
ﻧﻜﺎﺕ:
-1ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ 1ﻛﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻳﺪ .ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ 90º
ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ UG29.2ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺖ ،ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
-2ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺩﺭ ODﺑﻪ IDﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ IDﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺛﺮ
ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ .ﺿﻤﻨﺎ" ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻳﻨﮕﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ
ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ Ventﻭ Drainﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
-3ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ h/Dﻛﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ )ﺑﺮﻋﻜﺲ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ
ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﻢ( ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺪ ،ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .
-4ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ،ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Page 26 of 79
Openings: UG36
1 Process Nozzles (Inlet, Outlet,….)
2 Instrument Nozzles (PT, TT,…)
3 Mechanical Nozzles )…(Manhole, Handhole,
* ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺍﻭﻝ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ Pipingﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻬﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ WRCﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
* ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻠﻨﺠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺍﺯﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ:
ASME B 16.5 : NPS ≤ 24”
”ASME B 16.47 Series A, B : NPS > 24
* ﺩﺭ ASME B 16.5ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ،ﻓﻠﻨﺠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻼﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ
ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.:
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ )ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ.
ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ:
Internal Pressure
PR i
P = Pi + PH t r = + C . A .
pipe
SE - 0 . 6 P
External Pressure
ℓ/D
Factor A (Mat. Chart, D.T., Factor A)
D/t
Factor B Pa
Page 27 of 79
* ﻃﺒﻖ ﻛﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ:
: Appendix 17ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ Large Openingﺍﺳﺖ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ،ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ Nozzle Projectionﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ
ﻛﻪ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻭ Hubﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ.
Page 28 of 79
* ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ Openingﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ
ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ .ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪ ﻭ Specﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ:
* ﺿﻤﻨﺎ" ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺟﻨﺴﻲ ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ
ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ Areaﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ Sall shell / Sall nozzle/padﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻲ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ
ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ Areaﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ 1ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﻢ.
* ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ) ﻣﺜﻼ ( tshell > 50mm " ﺩﺭ Specﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ Openingﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ Openingﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ 3ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ:
-1ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ :ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ.
-2ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ :ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.
-3ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻠﻨﺠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ:
ﺍﻟﻒ – ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ Long W.N.ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ
ﺏ – ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻠﻨﺠﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎ Hubﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺡ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ Hubﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ
UG45ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ Hubﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺝ – ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ :Heavy Barrelﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻛﻪ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ"
ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ "ﺍﻟﻒ" ﻭ "ﺏ" ﺟﻮﺍﺑﮕﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ N1ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ N2ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺯﻳﺮﺍ N1ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻛﺎﻧﺘﻮﺭ
PR
= t r ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻭﻟﻲ N2ﺩﺭ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ L=0.9Dﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ
SE - 0. 6 p
PR
= t r ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﻴﻀﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ
2 SE - 0 . 6 p
ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻃﺒﻖ UG45ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
treq N1 < treq N2 ﭘﺲ :
ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ N1ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ N2ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ N1ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ N2ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺯﻳﺮﺍ:
PR
treq = , R1 < R2 treq N1 < treq N2
Cone
)Cos α (SE0.6P
Page 29 of 79
: UG45ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﮔﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ،ﺷﺮﻁ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻬﺎﻱ UG22ﺩﺭ ﮔﻠﻮﻳﻲ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ
ﺷﻮﺩ )):(UG45(c
Allow. Shear Stress ≤ 0.7 x Allow. Tensile Stress
ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ،ﺗﻠﺮﺍﻧﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ 12.5%ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ
ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
* ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻃﺒﻖ UG45ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ E=1ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ .ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ
ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ Full RTﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ
ﻫﻢ E=1ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
* ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ
ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺛﺮﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻳﺎ
Line of Supportﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ.
Page 30 of 79
)Jacketed Vessels (App. 9
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ) ﺑﺠﺰ (HalfPipeﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ PVEliteﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
Page 31 of 79
HalfPipe Jackets (App. EE)
، ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ، ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﭙﺎﺭﭼﻪJacket ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ
. ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ4" “ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮHalf Pipe” ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻜﺘﻬﺎﻱ
P’ = Permissible Jacket Pressure (psi)
S = Max. Allow. Tensile Stress @ Design Temp. of Shell or Head material (psi)
S’ = Actual Longitudinal Stress (if axial forces are negligible, S’=PR/2t) (psi)
P, R, t = Int. Design Press. (psi), Inside Radius (in.), Thk.(in.) of Vessel
K = Factor obtained from Figures in App.EE
S1 = Allow. Stress of the Jacket Material @ Design Temp. (psi)
r = Inside Radius of the Jacket (in.)
T = Min. Thk. of the HalfPipe Jacket (in.)
:Half Pipe ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ
Fillet Weld Size ≥ 1.414 T
Page 32 of 79
Dead Load ﻭLive Load ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ
Live Load / AISC
Dead Load: for NonPressure Parts AISE S.F. Allowable Stress
ASCE
UBC
: ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ
2
qz = 0.00256 V
: ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ30 ft ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ1x1 ft 2 ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ
H = 30ft E = ½ mv 2 P= ½ PV 2
ρair atm, 25ºC = 0.00238 slug/ft 3
2
1 æ 5280 ö 2 2
P = ´ 0 . 00238 ´ ç ÷ V = 0 . 00256 V
2 è 3600 ø
mile/hr ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ:V
: ﺩﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ،ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ
qz = CfGh (0.00256 V 2 )
Cf = Shape Factor
Gh = Height Factor
N=1/7 Open, Flat, Open Country
N=1/4.5 Town,….
N=1/3 Large City, Center of City Hbuildings ≥ 70ft
V = V1 (Z1/Z2) n
Fw = qz x Awind
Fw = CfGh x 0.00256 V 2 Awind
Awind = De.ℓ
De = Effective Diameter
R.Moss ODvessel + 2 Thkinsulation = De
( ﺑﺎﻳﺪR.Moss) ﻃﺒﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮDe ، ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢPlatform ﻭLadder ﻭPiping ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ
.ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺷﻮﺩ
Page 33 of 79
Piping+ Ladder & Platform Piping Without Ladder & Platform
ﺩﺭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺿﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ ،ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻜﭙﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ
ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﻜﻪ ﺗﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ.
2
Fw = Cf Gh (0.00256 V ) x A
ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ.
V, M τ = V/A
σ = MC/I
MC M
= s e =
I Z
Stress Combination Load Cases
ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ
ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ.
Page 34 of 79
ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺩWind Loading
M W PD
σL = σL )Live + σL )Dead + σL )Int. = - +
z A 4t
M W PD
σL = σL )Live + σL )Dead + σL )Int. = - +
z A 4t
σL > 0 , Max. Allowable Stress = S x ECirc. s L
< 1 σL √ Ok
S .E Circ
s L
³ 1 Þ Re calculatio n & t - or . . E -
S . E Circ
σL < 0, Max. Allowable Compressive Stress = Sc s L
< 1 √ Ok
S c
s L
³ 1 Þ Re calculatio n & t -
S c
ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ :
Sall tensile f (Mat, T) x E
Sall Compressiveﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ Sall tensileﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ .ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ
ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺎﻛﻢ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ:
Live Load: Wind, Earthquake
Dead Load: Operating, Empty, Hydrotest
Pressure : Internal, External, Hydrotest, No pressure
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ :
1. Wind + Op.w + Int. Pres.
2. Wind + Emp.w + Int. Pres.
3. Wind + Hydro.w + Hydro.Pres.
4. Wind + Emp.w + Ext. Press.
5. …..
ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﺎﻗﺼﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ Hydrotestﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ 33%ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ Hydrotestﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻛﻼ" ﺩﺭ 17 ، PVEliteﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ Load Cases
ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ،ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ،ﮔﺸﺘﺎﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﮊﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ
ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Page 35 of 79
ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ،ﺍﺻﻮﻻ" ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻭﺍﻡ
ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ .ﺣﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎ" ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﺭﻣﻮﻧﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ.
ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺯﻥ ،ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ
) ،(Seismic Zoneﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﺏ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻭ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ.
ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻭﺯﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺭﺍ
ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﻃﺒﻖ UBC 97ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ:
W
F 1 = 1 xV
W total
ZIC
V = W
R
V= Total shear at base
Z = Zone coefficient
I = Importance factor (usually 1.0 for vessels)
C = f (T,S)
S = Soil factor
T = Vessel period of vibration
W = WOp/WEmpty/WHyd
Page 36 of 79
ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻮﻡ – ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭPVElite
SELECT MATERIAL
ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ASME Sec.II, Part D, Subpart1ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Page 37 of 79
Occurrence
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻠﺲ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ،ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻓﺖ Sallﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ
ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻌﻼﻭﻩ ﺩﺭ Noteﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ Material Properties for ...ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻨﺪ .
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ Noteﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ F1ﭘﻨﭽﺮﻩ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Composition
ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺁﻟﻴﺎﮊﻱ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Form
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ) Pipe, Plateﻭ (......
UNS Number
ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻠﻲ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ).(Unified Numbering System
Class/Thickness
ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻲ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺟﻨﺲ Boltﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ
ﺻﻮﺭﺕ 4 < t <7ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﻄﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ،ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ Sallﻭ
Syieldﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ Compositionﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻭ Noteﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ،
ﺩﺭ Class/Thicknessﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ.
Normalized Material
ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺻﺮﻓﺎ" ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ Impact Testﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ
ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ.
P Number
The number of welding proceduregroup.the classification of materials based on hardenability
characteristic and the purpose of grouping is to reduce the number of weld of procedures. (Section
IX). All C.S. materials listed in the Code (with the exception of SA612) are classified as PNo.1.
Group Number
ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ Impact Testﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ PQRﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺑﺎ Gr. No.ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ
ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ SA516 Gr.60ﻭ SA516 Gr.70ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ P.No.ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻭﻟﻲ Gr. No.ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﺩﺭ
ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ Impact Testﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ PQRﺟﻨﺲ SA516 Gr.70ﺑﺮﺍﻱ SA516 Gr.60ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
External Pressure Curve
ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ) .ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ (ASME Sec.II
* ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Page 38 of 79
-3ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ SA36ﻭ SA283 ABCDﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ:
DESIGN CONSTRAINTS
Design Int./Ext. Pressure/Temperature
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Datum Line Distance
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﺟﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ Nozzle Elev.ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ
ﺧﻂ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻛﺮﺩ.
Hydrotest Type
ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ:
Sall test
A = Lowest Ratio of
Sall design
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻝ 1999ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ 1.5ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ 1.3ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﺪ )1.25
ﺑﺠﺎﻱ 1.1ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭘﻨﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ( .ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ.
Add.99
æ1 2 ö
Þ
÷ S all = Min ç S ut , S y
è 4 3 ø
æ 2 2 ö
÷ S all = Min ç S ut , S y
è 7 3 ø
ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎ" ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺗﺴﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺩﺭ PVElite
ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ User Defined Hyd. Pres. ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ
Page 39 of 79
ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺗﺴﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ
ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Hydrotest Position
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ.
* ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ
Projection From Top/Bottom
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ/ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ
ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ UG99cﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
)Projection From Bottom (Operating
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ
MAWPﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ.
Min. Design Metal Temp.
ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
Flange Distance to Top
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ
MAPncﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ )UG99(cﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ.
Degree of Radiography
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ UW11ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Miscellaneous Weight
ﺩﺭﺻﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
User Defined MAWP /MAPnc
ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ ،ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Additional Oper. Static Press .
ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ.
Use Higher Long. Stress
ﻃﺒﻖ ) ،UG23(dﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ،ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ 1.2ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
Hyd. Allow . Unmodified
ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﺘﻲ ) (Occasional Loadsﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﺪ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ
ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ 1.3ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ
ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ 1.2ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ ،ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺪ ﺯﻧﮓ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻤﺮﺩ:
)Sall S.S. = Min.( 0.9Sy, 2/7 SUT
ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ Sallﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺗﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Page 40 of 79
Consider Vortex Shedding:
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ Wind Vibrationﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﻨﺪ .ﺑﺎ
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ ،ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻬﺎﻱ VE, VF, VOﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ Load casesﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
Corroded H ydrotest
ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺗﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Hyd. Allow . is 90 % Yield
ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺗﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ 0.9Syﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺩ .ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ،ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺗﺴﺖ 1.3ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺗﻨﺶ
ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ.
LOAD CASES
* ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ F1ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻋﻼﻳﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ.
* ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻗﺴﻤﺖ Stress due to combined loadsﺍﺯ
ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ،ﻣﺨﺘﺺ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ
ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻭ
ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺸﺸﻲ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ 1
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ.
* ﺿﻤﻨﺎ" ﺩﺭ ﺗﻔﺴﻴﺮ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ Sall.Eﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ1.3 ،
ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Use Higher Long. Stressﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺩ
ﺿﺮﻳﺐ 1.2ﺑﺮﺍﻱ Sall.Eﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ UBC 97ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ
ﺑﺎﻋﺚ 1.2ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ Sall Eﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ UBC 97ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Apply per
1612.3.2ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ،ﺑﺮﺍﻱ Skirtﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ 1.3 Sall E ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ،ﺿﺮﻳﺐ 1.2ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ.
* ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻛﺪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺩ
ﻳﺎ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ ،ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ .ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ" ﺗﻨﺶ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ
ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ.
* ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ) (Corrodedﺑﺎ ) (NonCorrodedﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ،ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ
ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ I/Cﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ،ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ﻭﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺯﻥ
ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻭﻟﻲ I/Cﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭼﻚ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ
ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ I/C؟
Page 41 of 79
Global Scalar for WI/ EQ Load s
ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ،ﺿﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ .ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ )ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ
ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ Load caseﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
Vary Compressive Allowable for Internal/ External Case s
ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ Allow. Compressive Stress
ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ Sallﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ
ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ Sallﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ .ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ
ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ Plantﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻼء ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ
ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
Corroded Case Components WE, WF , CW
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ،ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻭﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ،ﻭﺯﻥ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ.
Installation / Misc . Options
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺟﻨﺒﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ Insulation, Tray, Packing, Platformﻭ Liningﺩﺭ Shop
ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ Fieldﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ
ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺎﻩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ
ﺩﺭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ.
Nozzle Design Pressure Options
ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
* ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺩﺭ Specﻫﺎ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ MAWPﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺋﻲ ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ،ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ،ﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻭ .....ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ،
ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ Design Pressureﺑﺎ MAWPﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ
ﻛﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ MAWP + Static Headﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Consider MAPnc
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ MAPncﺍﺳﺖ.
Consider Ext. Loads for Nozzle T r
ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ،ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ
ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Consider Code Case 2168 ( Div . 1 )
ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ.
Design Pads to Reinforce Openings
ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Page 42 of 79
SEISMIC DATA
Seismic Design Code:
ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ .ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﺪ UBC 1997ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ،ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ No Seismic Loadsﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Seismic for Hydrotest (%):
ﺩﺭﺻﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ.
Importance Factor:
1 ≤ I ≤ 1.25 ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ 16Kﻛﺪ UBC 1997ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻄﺮﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ Plantﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ
1.25ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Seismic Coefficient “Ca ,Cv ” :
ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ) (Zoneﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
Near Source Factor “Nv ” :
ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﺴﻠﻬﺎ .ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺳﻌﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ Plantﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ 15kmﺗﺎ
ﮔﺴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐNv= 1.0
Force factor R or Rp :
ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ 16Pﺍﺯ .UBC 1997
Apply Allow. Per 1612.3.2 :
ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ 1612.3.1ﺍﺯ ،UBC 1997ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )ﺑﺮ
ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ،(1612.3.2ﺿﺮﻳﺐ 1.33ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ Skirtﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ 1.2ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Use Higher Long. Stressﺍﺭﺟﺤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺷﻼﻗﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ
ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ:
T < 0.7 Sec Ft = 0
T > 0.7 Sec Ft = Min.(0.07 TV , 0.25V)
Ft = Lateral Force applied at top of Structure (lb)
T = Period of Vibration (sec.)
)V = Base Shear (lb
Page 43 of 79
ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ
ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ Skirtﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ:
Ftﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺷﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ Shear
w h
Fh = (V - F t ) . x x /1.4 ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ:
Sw i h i
ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ Wxﻭﺯﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ Hx .ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺿﻤﻨﺎ" ﺑﺎﻳﺪ
ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ Wxﺟﻤﻊ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ،ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ......
WIND DATA
Wind Design Code:
ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺩ.،ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﺪ UBCﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ،ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ
No Wind Loadsﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ.
Wind for hydrotest (%):
ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺻﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺴﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﻔﺘﺪ.
Base Elevation:
ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻒ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
Exposure Constant:
ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ﭼﻘﺪﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺯﺵ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﻧﻊ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎﻱ
ﭘﺘﺮﻭﺷﻴﻤﻲ Exposure C ،ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Importance Factor:
1 ≤ I ≤ 1.15 ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ 23Lﻛﺪ UBCﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Beta:Operating/Empty/Full:
ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻴﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻛﭽﺮ .ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ 0.01ﺍﺳﺖ.
Wind Deflection
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺟﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩ Trayﻫﺎ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ Vesselﻫﺎ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ:
Max. Allowable Deflection = ℓ/200, 6in./100ft
ﺩﺭ ، PVEliteﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ:
Tools Configuration Allowable Tower Deflection
Page 44 of 79
LINING
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻪ
ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭﺭﻗﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ
ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ) .(ASME Sec.VIII, Div.I, Part UCLﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ:
ﺍﻟﻒClad -
ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻧﺪﻩ )ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﻱ( ﺑﺎ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ S.S.ﻳﺎ Tiﭘﻮﺷﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﺏLining -
ﻭﺭﻗﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ 15 cm x 15 cmﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ S.S.ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﮕﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺒﻠﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
ﻭﺭﻕ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ ،ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ ﭘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ.
ﺝWeld Metal Overlay -
ﺩﺭ ﻓﻠﻨﺠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ Cladﻳﺎ Liningﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ،ﺑﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﺩ S.S.ﺭﻭﻱ
ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ.
Distance From "From" Node
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ Liningﺍﺯ Nodeﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Height/Length of Lining
ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻳﺎ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ Liningﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Thickness/Density of Lining
ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ Liningﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Full
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ Liningﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ Distanceﻭ Height/Lengthﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ Liningﻛﺮﺩ.
PACKING
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ Demisterﻭ Demisterﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ .ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ :
Distance From "From" Node
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ Liningﺍﺯ Nodeﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Height/Density of Packed Section
ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ) Packingﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ( ﻭ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Full
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ Packingﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ.
Page 45 of 79
Percent Volume Hold up %
ﺩﺭﺻﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ Packingﺣﺒﺲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Liquid Specific Gravity
ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻣﺤﺒﻮﺱ ﺩﺭ Packingﺍﺳﺖ.
Add New Packing
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ Packingﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
NOZZLE
* ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﭘﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ Cyclicﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻬﺎﻱ SelfReinforcedﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ )ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ 5ﻭ (6ﻳﺎ
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ Studded Outletﻳﺎ Heavy Barrelﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ FVC Catalogueﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Just Like
ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ
ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ،ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩ.
?Is this Nozzle Connected to Another Nozzle
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ Branchﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ،ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ .ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ.
ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ،ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Parent Nozzleﻧﺎﻡ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
* ﺩﺭ ASMEﻧﺎﺯﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ Reinforcement Areaﻣﻌﺎﻑ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻓﻴﺘﻲ
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Tools Configuration Compute and Print Areas for Small Nozzles
Page 46 of 79
Distance From “From Node” / Elev.
ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ Shellﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ Nodeﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ
ﺍﺳﺖ) .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ Datumnﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ،ﺍﺯ Elev.ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ(
Layout Angle
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ Orientationﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ Shell/Headﺍﺳﺖ.
Hillside Offset Dimension L or Angle between Shell & Nozzle
ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻓﺴﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ Shell/Headﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ.
Hillside Nozzle Direction
ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Diameter/Thk. Basis
D < 14" : Thickness Basis = Minimum Diam. Basis = ID or OD
D ≥ 14" : Thickness Basis = Actual Diam. Basis = OD
Actual Thk.
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ Thk. Basisﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Actualﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ Nozzle Sch.ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Noneﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Proj. Outside/Inside
Projectionﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Limits Diameter/Thk.
Limits Diameterﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺮﻃﺮﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ( ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ، Reinforcementﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ
ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ 2ﺑﺎﺭ
ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ A1ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ(UG42) .
Limits Thicknessﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ
ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ Reinforcementﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻬﺎﻱ Studded Outletﻳﺎ Couplingsﻃﺒﻖ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Overriding Weight
ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ،ﻭﺯﻥ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ
ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Page 47 of 79
Groove Weld Depth
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺟﻮﺵ Grooveﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ Padﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ
ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺟﻮﺵ Grooveﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ
ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻛﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ"
ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ Padﻳﺎ
) Shellﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ( ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ
ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ Shellﻳﺎ Padﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ ﻭ
ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻃﺮﺍﺡ
ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ Padﻳﺎ Shellﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ .ﻣﺜﻼ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻭ Blindﺁﻥ
ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ Blindﺟﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Weld Leg at Pad OD
ﺳﺎﻕ ﺟﻮﺵ Filletﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻧﻲ Padﺑﻪ Shellﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Outside Fillet Weld Leg
ﺳﺎﻕ ﺟﻮﺵ Filletﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻭ Shellﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻭ Padﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ Outside Projectionﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
Min Leg = 1.4 tc (UW16)
Inside Fillet Weld Leg
ﺳﺎﻕ ﺟﻮﺵ Filletﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻭ Shell
ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻭ Padﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ Inside
Projectionﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ Inside Proj.ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ،ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺎﻕ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ.
Page 48 of 79
Weld Type
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Noneﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺩﺭ Fig.UW16.1ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ
ﮔﻴﺮﺩ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ UW16ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ،ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺍﺯ
ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
Neglect Areas
ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ A2 ، A1ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Tapped Hole Area Loss
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻠﺘﻲ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ
ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ
ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻪ؟
Local Shell Thickness
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﺯ Insert Plateﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
User Tr
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ trﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ
ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ ، Blindﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ Flat Headﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ tr Flat headﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ tr Blind Flangeﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ
ﺷﻮﺩ.
Blind Attached
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ Blind Flangeﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﻴﻢ.
Manway/Acc Opening
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯﻧﻮﻉ Manholeﻳﺎ Handholeﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ،ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ UG45ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ
ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ.
* ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ:
Sch. -1ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ UG45ﺍﺭﺿﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(
-2ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ Internal Projectionﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ Ventﻭ Drainﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Page 49 of 79
-3ﭼﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎ
-4ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ
* ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ ،ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ
ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻛﺮﺩ
ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻬﺎﻱ Hillsideﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ WRCﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ
ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ Nozzle Pro.ﻳﺎ ANSYSﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ WRCﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ASME Sec.VIII Div.IIﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﺯ Div.Iﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ
ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ WRC 107ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ
ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ WRC 107ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ:
Import Nozzle Data
ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ PVEliteﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ.
Analysis Type
ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ WRCﻭ ﻳﺎ ) FEAﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
Attachment Type
ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ R. Mossﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Vessel Type
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Cylinderﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ
Sphericalﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Diameter of Vessel
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ Cylinderﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ Spherical
ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻧﺤﻨﺎء Crownﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ.
Loads Tab
ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
Input Loads in WRC 107 Convention
ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ WRC 107ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ Stress Summationﻭ S.I.ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Input Loads in Global Convention
ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ،ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ Stress Summation , S.I.ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ
ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺩﺭ PVEliteﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ WRC 107
ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ .ﺿﻤﻨﺎ" ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ
ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻣﺜﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺎﺯﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ.
Page 50 of 79
Input (SUS)/(EXP)/(OCC) Loadings
ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ Z, Y, Xﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ) Sustainedﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ( ﻳﺎ Expansion
)ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ( ﻳﺎ ) Occasionalﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ( ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Additional Input Data
ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ:
WRC 107 Version
ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ WRCﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ March 1979 " ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
?Would you Like to Have Interactive Control
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻥ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ
ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻬﺎ ﻫﺮ
ﺟﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻭﻥ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ) ! ( ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
* ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﺧﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ.
Body Flange
ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ،ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ Manholeﻳﺎ ) Handholeﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ(Access Openings
ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ :
Manhole: 16" < D < 24"
"Handhole: 8" < D < 10
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ Internalﺑﺎ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ (Demisterﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ Manholeﺭﺍ
ﻧﺪﻫﺪ ،ﺍﺯ Body Flangeﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Body Flangeﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﻠﻨﺠﻬﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯ Slip On ، W.N. :ﻭ Ring Type
Page 51 of 79
p
= Fint D 2 P int ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ Boltﻫﺎ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ:
4
Fgasket seating = л DGWy ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ :Gasket Seating
1
b0 £ in . Þ b = b 0
4
1 b
b0 > in . Þ b = 0
4 2
Page 52 of 79
Overall Flange Length
ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻃﻮﻝ Hubﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﻃﻮﻝ ، Hubﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ، Flange dialogﺍﻳﻦ
ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﺮﺩ.
Finished Thickness
ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ )ﻃﺒﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ(
ANSI B16.5/B16.47 Grade, ANSI B16.5/B16.47 Class, Flange Weight
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻭ Gradeﻭ Class
ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
Flange/Face/Gasket ID/OD
ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭ ﮔﺴﻜﺖ ﺁﻥ
Hub Thk. Large/Small
ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ Hubﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺿﺨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺯﻛﺘﺮ )ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ(
Hub Length
ﻃﻮﻝ ) Hubﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ(
Nominal Bolt Diameter
ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﭘﻴﭽﻬﺎ ) ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺭﺯﻭﻩ UNCﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ TEMAﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ(
Sketch/Column
ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ 2.5.2ﺍﺯ App.2ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Nubbin or RTJ Width
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ Sketchﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ “ ”2“ ,”1d“, ”1cﻳﺎ “ ”6ﻃﺒﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ 2.5.2ﺍﺯ App. 2 ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻋﺮﺽ Nubbinﺩﺭ
ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Base Required Thickness on Rigidity
ﻓﻠﻨﺠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺘﻲ
ﺻﻠﺐ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ .ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﭼﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ANSI Dimension Lookup
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ )ﻃﺒﻖ .(ANSIﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ Classﻭ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ “”ANSI Dim Lookup
ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ Gasketﻭ Sketchﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
* ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ Mating Flangeﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ
ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺟﻨﺲ Gasketﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ Shell Side/Tube Sideﻣﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ
ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ.
Page 53 of 79
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﭼﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ،ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ Boltﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ
ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ Boltﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ Design, Seating,
Operatingﺁﻥ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ … Mat. Flange Loadﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻬﺎﻱ PVEliteﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
Axial Force/Bending Moment
ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻱ /ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﻤﺸﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ Flangeﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Partition Gasket Properties
ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ Partition Gasketﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ mﻭ yﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
* ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ Blindﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﭼﻨﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ :
Diameter Long /Short Span
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺑﻴﻀﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺍﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ
ﺩﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
Allowed Cover Deflection
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ TEMA Coverﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻧﺎﻣﻲ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ Deflectionﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
Perimeter along B.C.D.
ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺧﻂ ﮔﺬﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ Boltﻫﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ л x B.C.D
ﻧﻜﺎﺕ
* ﺩﺭﻛﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ Gasketﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ "Process Equipment Design " ﺗﺎﻟﻴﻒ "
"Brownell & Young ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ PVEliteﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
* ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ Boltingﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪFGasket ،
seatingﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ MAWPﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ
Gasket Seatingﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ Fint + FGasketﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ FGasket seatingﻧﺮﺳﺪ ،ﻓﻠﻨﺞ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
* ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ) UCS66(a)(3ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ MDMTﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ UCS66ﻭ UCS66.1ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺮﻭﺩ t/4
ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
ﻃﺒﻖ ASMEﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ Boltﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ TEMAﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ D5Mﻭ D5ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻬﺎﻱ PVEliteﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ
ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ Bolting Information for UNC ( or TEMA) Thread Seriesﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
Page 54 of 79
CONE
"To" End Inside Diameter
ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Cone Length
ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ،Conicalﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ Distanceﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ Toriconicalﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ) (T.L.ﺭﺍ
ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Half Apex. Angle
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺭﺍﺱ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻁ :ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Line of Support Options
ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ،ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ Line of Supportﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Toriconical
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ ،ﻣﻘﻄﻊ Toriconicalﻣﺪﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ Knuckleﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ
ﺳﺮ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Concentric
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ ،ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭﺍﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺪﻝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ) ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ “ (”Kettle Typeﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ.
Shell Section
ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ Shellﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
STIFFENING RING
?Cone to Shell Junction Ring
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺭﺩ ،ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺒﻪ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Page 55 of 79
ﺗﻮﺟﻪ :ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ Line of Support
ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺵ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
* ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ،ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ )ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ
(Design Constraintsﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻳﻨﮕﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺭﻳﻨﮕﻬﺎ ﺁﻧﻘﺪﺭ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﭼﺴﺒﻨﺪ.
* ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ) Results for Max. Stiffened Length (SLENﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ SLENﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ
ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ،ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ SLENﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ
ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻳﻨﮕﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ TTL + 1/3Hhead1 +1/3Hhead2ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ SLENﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
Ring Attachment Parameters
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ .ﻃﺒﻖ ﻛﺪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ
ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(:
UG30:
ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ t:
S ≤ 8t External Rings
S ≤ 12t Internal Rings
ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ:
* ﺩﺭ PVEliteﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ.
Design Constraints
Design Modification
Select Wall Thickness for Internal Pressure
Select Wall Thickness for External Pressure
Select Stiffening Rings for External Pressure
Select Wall Thickness for Axial Stress
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ Equipment Installation and Miscellaneous Optionsﻭ ﺩﺭ
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ Stiffener Type to Meet Inertia Requirementsﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ
ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻠﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ Barﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ:
ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ Hard Wayﻧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ Easy Way؟
ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ Hard Wayﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ
Easy Wayﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
* ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ Barﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩ .ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ
ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ،PVEliteﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ
Page 56 of 79
ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ.
* ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ Select from Standard Bar Ring Listﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﻪ
ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﺪ ،ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﻻﺯﻡ
ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ Runﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Select Stiffening Rings for Ext. Press.ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ
ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ" ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ.
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :
ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ Conicalﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Line of Supportﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ،
ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ )ﻃﺒﻖ
App.18ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ Line of Supportﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ
ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ( .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺨﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ
ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺵ ،ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎ" ﻳﻚ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
LEG
ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ Legﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ،ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ Headﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ Local Loadﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ
ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Distance from " From " Node
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ Legﺗﺎ Nodeﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ.
Leg Centerline Diameter
ﻗﻄﺮ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ Legﻫﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Leg Orientation
ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ Legﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ:
Page 57 of 79
ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Strongﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺧﻤﺶ ﻭ ﻛﻤﺎﻧﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ
ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ .ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Weakﺿﻌﻴﻔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Diagonalﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﺎﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ
ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
* ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ Specﻣﻨﻊ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ Legﺭﺍ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺮ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺘﻮﺭ
ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Length of Legs
ﻃﻮﻝ Legﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Section Identifier
ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ AISCﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
"Effective End Condition "k
ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﻛﻤﺎﻧﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ Legﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﺪﺩ 1ﻳﺎ 1.5ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺿﻤﻨﺎ" ﺑﺎ
ﺯﺩﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ F1ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ Kﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﻳﻜﻲ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ .ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ
ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ.
Perform WRC 107 Analysis
ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ،ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ WRCﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ
ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ Legﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
Are the Legs Cross Braced
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ Legﺍﺯ ) Bracingﺑﺎﺩﺑﻨﺪ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻔﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ
ﻛﻪ Bracingﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻛﺸﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ
ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ Braceﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻃﺒﻖ
ﻛﺘﺎﺏ R. Mossﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
* ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ Legﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ 7 ftﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ Cross Bracingﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Are These Pipe Legs
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ Pipeﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ،ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ID/ODﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ
ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ،ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ .ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻮﺷﻜﺎﺭﻱ Pipeﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ
ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﺯ Pipeﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ.
Base Plate Parameters
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ Base Plateﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ Legﻫﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ .ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ
ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ،ﭼﻮﻥ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ Anchor Boltﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺭﺍﻳﺸﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ AISCﺿﺮﻳﺐ Sallﺗﺤﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻭ 1.33 ،NonPressure Partsﺩﺭ
ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ) .ﺩﺭ ASMEﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ 1.2ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ Legﺑﻪ
ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ :
/Sall < 1 ﺧﻤﺸﻲ /Sall+ σyﺧﻤﺸﻲ σb/Sb + σx
: Sbﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺎﻧﺶ ﻭ : Sallﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ
Page 58 of 79
* ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ،Legﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ WRC 107ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Legﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ
ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ C12, C11ﻃﺒﻖ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ R. Mossﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ WRCﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻳﻦ
ﺩﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ) (Type of Stress Int.ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺩﻭﻣﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ
ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺳﻮﻣﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻪ Failﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ 2ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ.
SKIRT
ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ Straightﻭ ) Flared (Conicalﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ Skirtﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ Fillet Weldﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ Butt Weldﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ .ﺍﻣﺎ
ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ Skirtﻭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ Shellﻭ Skirtﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ
ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ Specﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ODﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ Skirt " ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﮔﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ
ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ J.Eskirt= 0.7ﺍﺳﺖ.
ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﻬﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ Skirtﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ :ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ، Gussets, Top Ring, Base Ring, Skirtﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ
Anchor Boltsﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Skirtﺑﻪ .Anchor Chair
ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻦ Skirtﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ C.A. ،ﺑﺮﺍﻱ Skirtﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ.
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ Skirtﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺮﺑﻨﻲ ﺍﺭﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ SA283ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ،ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ Specﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ
Discontinuity Stressﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺩﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Skirtﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ
ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ Skirtﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻨﺲ .S.S.
Page 59 of 79
Skirt Diameter at Base
ﻗﻄﺮ Skirtﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ Skirtﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺯ Inside Diameterﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ
ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ .ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺭﺍﺱ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﺯ 15ºﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Perform Base Ring Analysis
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ Base Ringﺭﺍ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﻢ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﻢ.
Base Ring Type
ﻧﻮﻉ Base Ringﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ.
1. Simple Basering
2. Basring with Gussets
3. Anchor Chair Cap Type Basering
4. Continuous Top Plate
ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ Std. Drawingﭘﺮﻭﮊﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﺮﺩ.
* ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ" ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ Body Flangeﺩﺍﺷﺖ ،ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ
ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ Boltﺭﺍ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ،ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ Boltﺻﺨﺎﻣﺖ Base/Top Ringﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ .ﺑﻪ
ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ Boltﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ
Base/Top Ringﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ Gussetﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Concrete Strength F’c/Fc
ﺗﻨﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﻤﻲ ﺑﺘﻦ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ Jawad & Farrﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Design Temperature
ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ Base Ringﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﺁﻓﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ
ﺍﺳﺖ.
Base Ring Design Option
ﺭﻭﺵ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ Base Ringﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Analyze
ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ،ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﻞ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻬﺎ
ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ.
Design
ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻮﺍﺑﮕﻮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ،ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ
ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ.
Brn. & Young Analyze
ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Analyzeﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ Brownell & Youngﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
Brn. & Young Design
ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Designﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ Brownell & Youngﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
Method for Basering Thickness Calc.
ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ baseringﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Neutral Axis Shift Method
ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ )ﺗﺎﺭ ﺧﻨﺜﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﻨﺲ( ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Simplified Method
ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﻬﺘﺮ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
Page 60 of 79
Sy/E for Plates
ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻭﺭﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ Anchor Chairﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ
ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Gusset Thickness
ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ
Dist. Between Gussets
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺭﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ Anchor Chairﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ Top Plateﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ،ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ
ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺁﭼﺎﺭﺧﻮﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﻬﺮﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ Anchor Boltﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ:
W > 4d
Top Plate Width
ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ Base Ringﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ
Top Plateﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺭﻕ Top Plateﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ
ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺎﺳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ Top Plateﺟﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩ.
Radial Top Plate Width
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺭﻕ Top Plateﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻌﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ .
?Use EIL Spec.
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ Base Ringﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ EILﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ
ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ Boltﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍء ﻫﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ Skirtﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ Base Ringﺗﺤﺖ Analyzeﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ
Boltﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ Designﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ.
Consider 2/3 Yield for Base Ring /Top Plate Allowables
ﺗﻨﺶ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻗﻬﺎﻱ Top Plate, Base Ringﺗﺎ 0.66 Syﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺩ.
LUG
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ) (D < 24in.ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺍﺯ 2ﻋﺪﺩ Lugﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ 4 " ﻋﺪﺩ .ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ
ﻋﻠﺖ ﻛﻪ Lugﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ" ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻲ
ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ Insulationﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ Lugﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ Base Ringﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ
ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ Lugﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ .ﺿﻤﻨﺎ" ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ Perform WRC 107 Calc.ﺗﺤﻠﻴﻞ WRCﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Lug
ﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ Lugﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ WRCﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻧﺪﻫﺪ ،ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ
ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ Lugﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ Ringﺍﺳﺖ.
Page 61 of 79
SADDLE
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ .ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ Zickﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ 2ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﺩ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ 2ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻲ
ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ.
Centerline Dim.B
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ
Saddle Contact Angle
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ 120ºﺍﺳﺖ.
Width/Thickness of Wear Plate
ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Wear Plate Contact Angle
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ Wear Plateﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ، 120ºﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺣﺪﻭﺩ 130ºﺍﺳﺖ.
Height of Section Ring
ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﺪﻝ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ
ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﻴﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ AISCﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ
ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ PVEliteﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪ.
Saddle Dimension A
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tangent Lineﺍﺳﺖ.
Friction Coefficient Mu
ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻳﺎ Sliding Plateﺍﺳﺖ .ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ Mu .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ
ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ:
ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ -ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ -ﺑﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻓﻮﻻﺩﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻭﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﺯﻳﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻟﻐﺰﻧﺪﻩ Sliding Plateﺍﺯ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻓﻮﻻﺩ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﻪ
ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﻧﺒﺴﺎﻁ ﻭ ﺍﻧﻘﺒﺎﺽ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ.
Perform Saddle Check
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
Material Yield Stress
ﺗﻨﺶ ﺗﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺳﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺳﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ
PVEliteﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ" ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ.
Page 62 of 79
E for Plates
ﻣﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻴﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﻭﺭﻗﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ )ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ(
ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ Eﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﺩﺭ PVEliteﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ Eﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻬﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ
ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ Conical Section ،ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ Eﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ،ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻚ
Coneﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺟﻨﺲ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ Eﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
Height of Web
ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ Webﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Same as First
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ" ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ
ﻃﺒﻖ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ..
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺳﺪﻝ Failﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ Compressiveﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺪﻝ
ﻳﺎ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺣﻞ ﻧﺸﺪ ،ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ،ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ PVEliteﺗﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺘﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ.
ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ Ribﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ Ribﺑﺎ Webﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎ Rib
ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ.
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻳﻚ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻃﻮﻟﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﺶ ﻭﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ
ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ،ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻣﻼﻙ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
AISC Unity Check
ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ AISCﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ 1ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ Webﻭ
Ribﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ.
ﻧﻜﺘﻪ :ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺳﺪﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺗﺴﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻧﺪﺍﺩ ،ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ Webﻭ Ribﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ ،ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﮔﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ
ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﺗﺴﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ Syﻭ Sallﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ
ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ.
Page 63 of 79
TRAY
Tray Spacing
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ Trayﻫﺎﺳﺖ.
Tray Weight per Unit Area
ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ Trayﻫﺎﺳﺖ.
Support Ring and Bolting Bar Weight
ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺭﻳﻨﮓ ﻭ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻭ ﻣﻬﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻩ Trayﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﻋﺮﺽ Supporting Ringﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ 50mmﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ
ﻛﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ
ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
Height/Density of Liquid on Tray
ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮ Trayﻣﻲ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺪ.
* ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ Trayﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ Nextﻭ Prevﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ
ﻛﺮﺩ.
PLATFORM
Distance From "From" Node
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺍﺯ Nodeﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ .
Platform Start/End Angle
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺍﺳﺖ .
Platform Railing Weight
ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺮﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
Platform Grating Weight
ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﺭﻗﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﻛﻒ ﺳﻜﻮﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺳﻌﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ
ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﺳﻜﻮ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ.
Platform Width
ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ Specﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ 800mmﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Platform Height
ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻧﺮﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﺳﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ 1100mmﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Clearance
ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻟﺒﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﻃﺒﻖ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ 50mm + Insulation Thk.ﺍﺳﺖ.
Force Coefficient Cf
ﺿﺮﻳﺐ Cfﻃﺒﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ASCEﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ .ﺍﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﺑﻴﻦ 1.2ﺗﺎ 1.8ﺍﺳﺖ.
Page 64 of 79
Platform Wind Area
Load cases ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﻭ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ
Installation Misc. Optionsﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ،ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺻﻠﺐ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ
ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﻜﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﺮﺿﻲ ﻧﺎﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ Overestimateﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ.
ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
)Wind Area = 1/3 Height * Width * Force Coef (Cf
* ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺍﺯ 180ºﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ،ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ،ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻻ ) ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ
ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ 1ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﺪ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻛﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺍﺯ
180ºﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ 2ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﻜﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
Ladder Layout Angle
ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﺩﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Ladder Start/Stop Elevation
PVEliteﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻧﺮﺩﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻜﻮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻧﺮﺩﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ
ﺭﻭﻧﺪ.
Ladder Unit Weight
ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﺮﺩﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﺮﺩﺑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ) (Cageﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺷﻮﺩ.
?Is This a Caged Ladder
ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ 3Dﻭ 2Dﻧﺮﺩﺑﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ .
Platform & Ladder Weight
ﻭﺯﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺳﻜﻮ ﻭ ﻧﺮﺩﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ
ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﺪ .
Page 65 of 79
WEIGHT
ﺁﻳﺘﻤﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ PVEliteﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ،
ﺗﻮﺳﻂ Weightﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻛﺮﺩ.
Offset from Element Centerline
ﺍﻓﺴﺖ ﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻓﺴﺖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ
ﺑﺪﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ )ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻣﺮﻛﺰﻱ( ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ.
Miscellaneous Weight
ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Is This a Welded Internal
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ،ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ Shipping/Shop Test/Fabricatedﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ
ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ Element & Detail Weightsﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ Weight Detailsﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺯﻥ
ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ Total Weight of Weightsﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺁﻥ ،ﺁﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ
ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ ،ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ Hydrtotest, Empty, Operatingﻭ ...ﻭﺯﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ
ﻭﺯﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻊ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻋﻼﻡ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
FORCE/ MOMENT
ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ Y, Xﻳﺎ Zﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ
Force/Momentﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻣﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ.
Applied Forces/Moment
ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ Z, Y, Xﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ.
Force/Moment Combination Method
PVEliteﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ.
ﺭﻭﺵ SRSSﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺟﺒﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ،ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ
Page 66 of 79
ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ.
ﺭﻭﺵ Algebraicﻋﻼﻣﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺒﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭘﺎﺳﺨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ ،ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻧﺪ.
ﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺟﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ" ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ Wind Deflection
ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ
160170 mmﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺒﺮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ:
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ،ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﻮﺭﺳﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ،ﺳﺎﺯﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺁﻥ ،ﺑﺮﺝ
ﺭﺍ ﻣﻬﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺳﺎﭘﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻴﻪ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ
SAPﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ Force/Momentﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ.
Compute Longitudinal Stresses BW Normally Added to the Wind Case
Compute Longitudinal Stresses BW Normally the Seismic Case
ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻟﺰﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ Lifting Lug
ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ Lifting Lugﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ :ﻗﻄﺮ ﭘﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺁﻥ ،ﻭﺭﻕ Lugﻭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺁﻥ،
ﺟﻮﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ Lugﺑﻪ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ ،ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ Lugﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺪﻡ
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ Failﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ.
ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺑﺤﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ
ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ Lugﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ:
Page 67 of 79
WCos . aL 1
F1 = W - ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺗﺮﻧﻴﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ
( L 1 + L 2 ) Cos . a + RSin . a
ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻧﻴﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﻭ
ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ .Spread Bar
ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ،ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ Spread Barﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﺍﺭﺟﺤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ .ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ
ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺯﻧﺠﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻮﻟﻔﻪ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺮﻧﻴﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺭ
ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻧﻴﻮﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ Code Calcﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ Legs &
Lugsﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ.
Type of Analysis
ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ Lugﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ Support, Liftingﻭ ﻳﺎ Trunnionﺍﺳﺖ .ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻮﻉ
، Lugﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻪ Lugﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ
ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ F1ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ Help .ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ
ﻣﻜﻔﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ.
ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ Support Lugﻭ ﺗﺮﻧﻴﻮﻥ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻳﻜﺠﺎ ﻭ Integralﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ WRC
ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ .ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ Lifting Lugﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺎﮊﻭﻝ
WRC107/FEAﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ WRCﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ Integralﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ Lugﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ .ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ
ﻣﺴﺘﻄﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ C11ﻭ C22ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ R.mossﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
ﺿﻤﻨﺎ" ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ WRCﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ Lugﻭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ،
ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ WRCﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ.
Page 68 of 79
* ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮﺵ Lifting Lugﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺖ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﻈﻤﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻂ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ.
Insert Element
ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ.
Delete Element
ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Update Element
ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ.
Share
ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﺻﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻗﻄﺮ ،ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ J.E. ،ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ
ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ From "From "Node ﻭ to "From" Nodeﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ،ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ.
Flip Orientation
ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ .ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﻲ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻛﻪ
ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ،ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﺰﺑﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺗﺎ
ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Select Material
ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ.
Zoom
ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ 2Dﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ Zoomﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
View Element
ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ،ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Pipe Properties
ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥ Cylindricalﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ،ﺑﺎ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻭ Sch.ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
List Dialog
ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﺯﻟﻬﺎ Packing, Force/Moment, Weight,ﻭ Ringﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ،ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ
ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ) (Spread Sheetﺑﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ Excelﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ.
Write Foundation 3D File
ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ Foundation 3Dﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ.
Export to DXF File
ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ " "Bill of Materialﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ DXFﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ .ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ PVElite
ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ.
Flip to 3D View
ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ.
Rigging Results
ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ Rigging Dataﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ:
Page 69 of 79
Load cases Installation Misc. Options
ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ،ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺭ Runﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ،ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻤﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﻤﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺲ
ﺧﻤﺸﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺧﻤﺶ /ﺑﺮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ.
Create Database
ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ Runﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ Accessﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ.
ﻧﻜﺎﺕ :
* ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺻﺮﻓﺎ" ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻴﻚ
ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ،ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ.
Tools Configuration Print Equations and Substitutions
* ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ PVEliteﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ،ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ
ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻭﻗﺖ ﮔﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ .ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ
ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺁﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﺮﺩ.
Tools Create/ Review Unit….
ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ PVElite\Systemﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ.
Page 70 of 79
ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ – ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻫﺎ
Page 71 of 79
Page 72 of 79
Page 73 of 79
Page 74 of 79
Page 75 of 79
ﻓﺼﻞ ﭘﻨﺠﻢ – ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ
Anchor Chair:
Gussets and plates welded to base plate and skirt to provide for anchor bolt attachment.
AsRolled Plate:
It refers to the unit plate rolled from a slab or directly from an ingot. It does not refer to the condition
of the plate.
B/SD @ 60ºF:
Barrels per Stream Day: This is the throughput during a 24hour period when a unit is operating at its
design capacity.
Throughput: The volume of feed stock charged to process equipment per unit of time.
Stream Day: A 24hour operating day of a refinery process unit.
Backing Strip:
A thin strip of metal placed on the backside of 2 plates to be butt welded, where a full penetration butt
weld is required & access is available to one side only.
Brittle Fracture:
It is the tensile failure of a material showing little deformation or yielding. It is so important in
material selection considerations.
Charpy VNotch Impact Test:
CVN Test is a dynamic test in which a notched specimen is struck & broken by a single blow in a
specially designed testing machine. The measured test values may be the energy absorbed, the
percentage shear fracture, the lateral expansion opposite the notch, or a combination thereof.
Chimney Tray:
A tray composed of chimneys extending above the liquid level of the tray, permitting passage of
vapors upward. The tray collects and removes all liquid products from a specific portion of the vessel.
Chipping:
One method of removing surface defects such as small fissures or seams from partially worked metal.
If not eliminated, the defects might carry through to the finished material. If the defects are removed
by means of a gas torch the term “deseaming”or “scarfing” is used.
Clad Vessel:
A vessel made from a base material having a corrosion resistant material integrally bonded or weld
metal overlaid to the base of less resistant material.
Communicating Chambers:
Appurtenances to the vessel which intersect the shell or heads of a vessel & form an integral part of
the pressure containing enclosure, e.g., Sumps.
Corrosion Rate:
It is specified as mils per year of metal loss and is applied to both pitting & general thinning. Typical
corrosion problems are controlled by additional corrosion allowance & by coatings (i.e. pitting rates
for crude oil tanks can be as high as 50 mpy). High temperature accelerate the corrosion rate.
Page 76 of 79
Distributor Tray:
A perforated tray that provides equal distribution of liquid over the vessel area. Risers on the tray
extend above the liquid level to permit passage of vapors rising upward.
Downcomers:
Rectangular flat plates bolted, welded or clamped to shell and trays inside of fractionation columns,
Used to direct process liquid and to prevent bypassing of vapor.
Elevation above Sea Level:
It directly affects the true vapor pressure limitation placed on stocks stored in atmospheric tankage. At
sea level, the max. allowable true vapor pressure is 13 psia. For each 1,000 ft elevation above sea
level, this value must be reduced by 0.5 psi.
Fatigue:
Tendency of materials to fracture under many repetitions of a stress considerably less than the
ultimate static strength.
Flash Point:
The min. temperature at which there is sufficient vapor generated to allow ignition of the airvapor
mixture near the surface of the liquid.
Fractionating Trays:
Circular flat plates bolted, welded or clamped to rings on the inside of fractionation columns, Used to
obtain vapor liquid contact, which results in fractionation.
Full Vacuum:
A condition where the internal absolute pressure is 0 psi & the external absolute pressure on the vessel
is 15 psi.
HighAlloy Steel:
Steel containing large percentages of elements other than carbon.
Internal Pressure:
The difference in pressure between the liquid vapor pressure & Atmospheric Pressure. When this
difference is negative, it is simply called a “vacuum”.
The pressure is measured at the top of the liquid in the tank because the liquid itself exerts hydrostatic
pressure.
Internal pressure is caused by several potential sources such as vapor pressure, inert gas blanketing
system,…
Killed Steel:
Steel deoxidized (i.e. by vacuum treatment) to reduce the content in order to omit any reaction
between oxygen & carbon during solidification.
Lined Vessel:
A vessel having a corrosion resistant lining attached intermittently to the vessel wall. (Code UA60)
Low Temp. Service:
Page 77 of 79
Service in which the fluid temp. during normal contingency operation is below the lowest 1day mean
ambient temp. for a particular location.
Membrane Stress:
The Component of normal stress which is uniformly distributed and equal to the average value of
stress across the thickness of the section under consideration.
Metal Test Report:
A document on which the material manufacturer records the results of tests examinations, repairs, or
treatments required by the basic material specification to be reported. (Code UA60)
Mist Eliminator (Demister):
A wire mesh pad held in place between tow light grids. The mist eliminator disengages liquids
contained in the vapor.
MTBE:
Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether.
Normalizing:
A heat treating process in which a steel plate is reheated to uniform temperature above the upper
critical temperature & then cooled in air to below the transformation range.
Plug Weld:
A weld made in a circular hole in one member of a lap joint. The hole may or may not be partially or
completely filled with weld metal.
Porosity:
Gas pockets or voids in metal. (Code UA60).
Pressure Relief Valve:
A valve which relieves pressure beyond a specified limit and recloses upon return to normal operating
conditions.
Quench Annealing:
Annealing an austenitic ferrous alloy by heating followed by quenching from solution temperatures.
Liquids used for quenching are oil, fused salt or water, into which a material is plunged.
Resistance Welding:
A pressure welding process wherein the heat is produced by the resistance to the flow of an electric
current.
Seal Pans:
Flat plates bolted, welded or clamped to rings inside of fractionation column shell below downcomer
of lowest tray, used to prevent vapor from bypassing up through the downcomer by creating a liquid
seal.
Section Modulus:
The term pertains to the cross section of a beam. The section modulus with respect to either principal
central axis is the moment of inertia with respect to that axis divided by the distance from that axis to
the most remote point of the section. The section modulus largely determines the flexural strength of a
beam of given material.
Page 78 of 79
Set Pressure:
Pressure at which the pressure relief device first opens.
Skirt Access Opening:
Circular holes in the skirt to allow workmen to clean, inspect, etc., inside of skirt.
Skirt Fireproofing:
Brick or concrete applied inside and outside of skirt to prevent damage to skirt in case of fire.
Skirt Vents:
Small circular holes in the skirt to prevent collection of dangerous gases within the skirt.
Slag:
A result of the action of a flux on nonmetallic constituents of a processed ore, or on the oxidized
metallic constituents that are undesirable. Usually consist of combinations of acid oxides and basic
oxides with neutral oxides added to aid fusibility.
Support Grid:
Grating or some other types of support through which vapor or liquid can pass, Used to support tower
packing (catalyst, rasching rings, etc.).
Undercut:
A groove melted into the base metal to the toe of a weld and left unfilled by weld metal.
Vapor Pressure:
The pressure of the vapor space above the liquid in a closed container. It increases with increasing
temperature.
Vortex breaker:
A device located inside a vessel at the outlet connection. Generally consisting of plates welded
together to form the shape of a cross. The vortex breaker prevents cavitation in the liquid passing
through the outlet connection.
Wrought Iron:
Iron refined to a plastic state in a pudding furnace. It is characterized by the presence of about 3 per
cent of slag irregularly mixed with pure iron and about 0.5 per cent carbon.
Page 79 of 79